Keyboard Part Number List

640 keyboards found/on record (showing page 1/3 - results 1 to 250)...

Page 2Page 3

IBM 3275/3277 Display Station Type B Final Keyboard Assembly

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.
1655154
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.
Model B 3275/3277 66-key Keyboard
NicknameNickname
A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy.
Beamsaver
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.
IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.
IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.
1974 Q2
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.
SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.
Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.
None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.
None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.
Black straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.
66
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.
UK Data Entry II
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.
Doc: IBM 3275 Display Station Models 1, 2 & 3 and 3277 Display Station Models 1 & 2 Parts Catalog (#S126-0005-2) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3275/3277 Display Station Type B Final Keyboard Assembly

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.
1655155
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.
Model B 3275/3277 66-key Keyboard
NicknameNickname
A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy.
Beamsaver
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.
IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.
IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.
1974 Q2
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.
SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.
Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.
None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.
None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.
Black straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.
66
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.
France Data Entry II
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.
Doc: IBM 3275 Display Station Models 1, 2 & 3 and 3277 Display Station Models 1 & 2 Parts Catalog (#S126-0005-2) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3275/3277 Display Station Type B Final Keyboard Assembly

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.
1655156
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.
Model B 3275/3277 66-key Keyboard
NicknameNickname
A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy.
Beamsaver
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.
IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.
IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.
1974 Q2
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.
SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.
Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.
None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.
None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.
Black straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.
66
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.
Germany Data Entry II
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.
Doc: IBM 3275 Display Station Models 1, 2 & 3 and 3277 Display Station Models 1 & 2 Parts Catalog (#S126-0005-2) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3275/3277 Display Station Type B Final Keyboard Assembly

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.
1655157
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.
Model B 3275/3277 66-key Keyboard
NicknameNickname
A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy.
Beamsaver
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.
IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.
IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.
1974 Q2
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.
SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.
Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.
None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.
None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.
Black straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.
66
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.
Italy Data Entry II
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.
Doc: IBM 3275 Display Station Models 1, 2 & 3 and 3277 Display Station Models 1 & 2 Parts Catalog (#S126-0005-2) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3275/3277 Display Station Type B Final Keyboard Assembly

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.
1655158
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.
Model B 3275/3277 66-key Keyboard
NicknameNickname
A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy.
Beamsaver
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.
IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.
IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.
1974 Q2
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.
SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.
Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.
None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.
None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.
Black straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.
66
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.
Portugal/Brazil Data Entry II
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.
Doc: IBM 3275 Display Station Models 1, 2 & 3 and 3277 Display Station Models 1 & 2 Parts Catalog (#S126-0005-2) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3275/3277 Display Station Type B Final Keyboard Assembly

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.
1655159
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.
Model B 3275/3277 66-key Keyboard
NicknameNickname
A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy.
Beamsaver
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.
IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.
IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.
1974 Q2
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.
SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.
Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.
None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.
None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.
Black straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.
66
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.
Norway Data Entry II
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.
Doc: IBM 3275 Display Station Models 1, 2 & 3 and 3277 Display Station Models 1 & 2 Parts Catalog (#S126-0005-2) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3275/3277 Display Station Type B Final Keyboard Assembly

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.
1655160
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.
Model B 3275/3277 66-key Keyboard
NicknameNickname
A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy.
Beamsaver
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.
IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.
IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.
1974 Q2
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.
SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.
Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.
None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.
None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.
Black straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.
66
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.
Denmark Data Entry II
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.
Doc: IBM 3275 Display Station Models 1, 2 & 3 and 3277 Display Station Models 1 & 2 Parts Catalog (#S126-0005-2) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3275/3277 Display Station Type B Final Keyboard Assembly

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.
1655161
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.
Model B 3275/3277 66-key Keyboard
NicknameNickname
A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy.
Beamsaver
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.
IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.
IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.
1974 Q2
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.
SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.
Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.
None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.
None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.
Black straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.
66
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.
Sweden/Finland Data Entry II
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.
Doc: IBM 3275 Display Station Models 1, 2 & 3 and 3277 Display Station Models 1 & 2 Parts Catalog (#S126-0005-2) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3275/3277 Display Station Type B Final Keyboard Assembly

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.
1655162
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.
Model B 3275/3277 66-key Keyboard
NicknameNickname
A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy.
Beamsaver
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.
IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.
IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.
1974 Q2
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.
SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.
Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.
None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.
None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.
Black straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.
66
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.
Spain Data Entry II
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.
Doc: IBM 3275 Display Station Models 1, 2 & 3 and 3277 Display Station Models 1 & 2 Parts Catalog (#S126-0005-2) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3275/3277 Display Station Type B Final Keyboard Assembly

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.
1655163
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.
Model B 3275/3277 66-key Keyboard
NicknameNickname
A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy.
Beamsaver
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.
IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.
IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.
1974 Q2
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.
SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.
Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.
None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.
None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.
Black straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.
66
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.
Belgium Data Entry II
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.
Doc: IBM 3275 Display Station Models 1, 2 & 3 and 3277 Display Station Models 1 & 2 Parts Catalog (#S126-0005-2) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3275/3277 Display Station Type B Final Keyboard Assembly

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.
1655164
Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers
Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it.
1864489
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.
Model B 3275/3277 66-key Keyboard
NicknameNickname
A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy.
Beamsaver
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.
IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.
IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.
1974 Q2
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.
SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.
Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.
None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.
None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.
White straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.
66
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.
WTC Data Entry II w/ smooth finish keys
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.
Doc: IBM 3275 Display Station Models 1, 2 & 3 and 3277 Display Station Models 1 & 2 Parts Catalog (#S126-0005-2) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3275/3277 Display Station Type B Final Keyboard Assembly

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.
1745697
Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers
Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it.
1785060
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.
Model B 3275/3277 66-key Keyboard
NicknameNickname
A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy.
Beamsaver
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.
IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.
IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.
1974 Q2
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.
SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.
Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.
None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.
None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.
Grey straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.
66
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.
Data Entry
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.
Doc: IBM 3275 Display Station Models 1, 2 & 3 and 3277 Display Station Models 1 & 2 Parts Catalog (#S126-0005-2) [source: bitsavers]
Web: https://sharktastica.co.uk/archive/view?id=0c854902bb2ff17c

IBM 3275/3277 Display Station Type B Final Keyboard Assembly

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.
1825028
Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers
Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it.
1858506
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.
Model B 3275/3277 66-key Keyboard
NicknameNickname
A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy.
Beamsaver
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.
IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.
IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.
1974 Q2
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.
SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.
Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.
None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.
None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.
White straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.
66
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.
US/Canada EBCDIC w/ textured finish keys
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.
Doc: IBM 3275 Display Station Models 1, 2 & 3 and 3277 Display Station Models 1 & 2 Parts Catalog (#S126-0005-2) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3275/3277 Display Station Type B Final Keyboard Assembly

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.
1825029
Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers
Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it.
1858507
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.
Model B 3275/3277 78-key Keyboard
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.
IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.
IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.
1974 Q2
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.
SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.
Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.
None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.
None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.
White straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.
78
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.
US/Canada EBCDIC w/ textured finish keys
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.
Doc: IBM 3275 Display Station Models 1, 2 & 3 and 3277 Display Station Models 1 & 2 Parts Catalog (#S126-0005-2) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3275/3277 Display Station Type B Final Keyboard Assembly

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.
1825030
Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers
Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it.
1858511
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.
Model B 3275/3277 66-key Keyboard
NicknameNickname
A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy.
Beamsaver
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.
IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.
IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.
1974 Q2
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.
SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.
Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.
None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.
None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.
White straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.
66
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.
US/Canada Data Entry w/ textured finish keys
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.
Doc: IBM 3275 Display Station Models 1, 2 & 3 and 3277 Display Station Models 1 & 2 Parts Catalog (#S126-0005-2) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3275/3277 Display Station Type B Final Keyboard Assembly

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.
1825031
Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers
Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it.
1858508
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.
Model B 3275/3277 66-key Keyboard
NicknameNickname
A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy.
Beamsaver
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.
IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.
IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.
1974 Q2
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.
SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.
Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.
None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.
None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.
White straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.
66
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.
US/Canada ASCII w/ textured finish keys
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.
Doc: IBM 3275 Display Station Models 1, 2 & 3 and 3277 Display Station Models 1 & 2 Parts Catalog (#S126-0005-2) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3275/3277 Display Station Type B Final Keyboard Assembly

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.
1825032
Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers
Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it.
1858509
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.
Model B 3275/3277 78-key Keyboard
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.
IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.
IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.
1974 Q2
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.
SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.
Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.
None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.
None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.
White straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.
78
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.
US/Canada ASCII w/ textured finish keys
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.
Doc: IBM 3275 Display Station Models 1, 2 & 3 and 3277 Display Station Models 1 & 2 Parts Catalog (#S126-0005-2) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3275/3277 Display Station Type B Final Keyboard Assembly

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.
1825033
Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers
Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it.
1858510
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.
Model B 3275/3277 78-key Keyboard
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.
IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.
IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.
1974 Q2
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.
SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.
Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.
None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.
None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.
White straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.
78
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.
US/Canada 1052-7 w/ textured finish keys
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.
Doc: IBM 3275 Display Station Models 1, 2 & 3 and 3277 Display Station Models 1 & 2 Parts Catalog (#S126-0005-2) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3275/3277 Display Station Type B Final Keyboard Assembly

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.
1832723
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.
Model B 3275/3277 78-key Keyboard
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.
IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.
IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.
1974 Q2
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.
SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.
Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.
None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.
None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.
Black straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.
78
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.
UK 1052-7
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.
Doc: IBM 3275 Display Station Models 1, 2 & 3 and 3277 Display Station Models 1 & 2 Parts Catalog (#S126-0005-2) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3275/3277 Display Station Type B Final Keyboard Assembly

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.
1832724
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.
Model B 3275/3277 78-key Keyboard
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.
IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.
IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.
1974 Q2
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.
SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.
Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.
None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.
None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.
Black straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.
78
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.
France 1052-7
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.
Doc: IBM 3275 Display Station Models 1, 2 & 3 and 3277 Display Station Models 1 & 2 Parts Catalog (#S126-0005-2) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3275/3277 Display Station Type B Final Keyboard Assembly

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.
1832725
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.
Model B 3275/3277 78-key Keyboard
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.
IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.
IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.
1974 Q2
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.
SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.
Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.
None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.
None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.
Black straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.
78
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.
Germany 1052-7 QWERTZ
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.
Doc: IBM 3275 Display Station Models 1, 2 & 3 and 3277 Display Station Models 1 & 2 Parts Catalog (#S126-0005-2) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3275/3277 Display Station Type B Final Keyboard Assembly

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.
1832726
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.
Model B 3275/3277 78-key Keyboard
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.
IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.
IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.
1974 Q2
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.
SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.
Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.
None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.
None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.
Black straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.
78
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.
Germany 1052-7 QWERTY
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.
Doc: IBM 3275 Display Station Models 1, 2 & 3 and 3277 Display Station Models 1 & 2 Parts Catalog (#S126-0005-2) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3275/3277 Display Station Type B Final Keyboard Assembly

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.
1832727
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.
Model B 3275/3277 78-key Keyboard
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.
IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.
IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.
1974 Q2
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.
SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.
Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.
None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.
None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.
Black straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.
78
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.
Italy 1052-7
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.
Doc: IBM 3275 Display Station Models 1, 2 & 3 and 3277 Display Station Models 1 & 2 Parts Catalog (#S126-0005-2) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3275/3277 Display Station Type B Final Keyboard Assembly

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.
1832728
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.
Model B 3275/3277 78-key Keyboard
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.
IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.
IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.
1974 Q2
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.
SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.
Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.
None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.
None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.
Black straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.
78
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.
Sweden 1052-7
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.
Doc: IBM 3275 Display Station Models 1, 2 & 3 and 3277 Display Station Models 1 & 2 Parts Catalog (#S126-0005-2) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3275/3277 Display Station Type B Final Keyboard Assembly

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.
1832729
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.
Model B 3275/3277 78-key Keyboard
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.
IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.
IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.
1974 Q2
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.
SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.
Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.
None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.
None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.
Black straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.
78
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.
Finland 1052-7
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.
Doc: IBM 3275 Display Station Models 1, 2 & 3 and 3277 Display Station Models 1 & 2 Parts Catalog (#S126-0005-2) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3275/3277 Display Station Type B Final Keyboard Assembly

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.
1832730
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.
Model B 3275/3277 78-key Keyboard
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.
IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.
IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.
1974 Q2
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.
SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.
Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.
None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.
None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.
Black straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.
78
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.
Denmark 1052-7
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.
Doc: IBM 3275 Display Station Models 1, 2 & 3 and 3277 Display Station Models 1 & 2 Parts Catalog (#S126-0005-2) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3275/3277 Display Station Type B Final Keyboard Assembly

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.
1832731
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.
Model B 3275/3277 78-key Keyboard
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.
IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.
IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.
1974 Q2
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.
SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.
Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.
None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.
None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.
Black straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.
78
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.
Norway 1052-7
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.
Doc: IBM 3275 Display Station Models 1, 2 & 3 and 3277 Display Station Models 1 & 2 Parts Catalog (#S126-0005-2) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3275/3277 Display Station Type B Final Keyboard Assembly

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.
1832732
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.
Model B 3275/3277 78-key Keyboard
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.
IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.
IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.
1974 Q2
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.
SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.
Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.
None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.
None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.
Black straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.
78
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.
Spain 1052-7
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.
Doc: IBM 3275 Display Station Models 1, 2 & 3 and 3277 Display Station Models 1 & 2 Parts Catalog (#S126-0005-2) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3275/3277 Display Station Type B Final Keyboard Assembly

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.
1832733
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.
Model B 3275/3277 78-key Keyboard
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.
IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.
IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.
1974 Q2
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.
SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.
Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.
None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.
None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.
Black straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.
78
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.
Belgium 1052-7
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.
Doc: IBM 3275 Display Station Models 1, 2 & 3 and 3277 Display Station Models 1 & 2 Parts Catalog (#S126-0005-2) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3275/3277 Display Station Type B Final Keyboard Assembly

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.
1832734
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.
Model B 3275/3277 78-key Keyboard
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.
IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.
IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.
1974 Q2
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.
SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.
Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.
None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.
None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.
Black straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.
78
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.
Portugal/Brazil 1052-7
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.
Doc: IBM 3275 Display Station Models 1, 2 & 3 and 3277 Display Station Models 1 & 2 Parts Catalog (#S126-0005-2) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3275/3277 Display Station Type B Final Keyboard Assembly

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.
1832735
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.
Model B 3275/3277 78-key Keyboard
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.
IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.
IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.
1974 Q2
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.
SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.
Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.
None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.
None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.
Black straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.
78
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.
Argentina 1052-7
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.
Doc: IBM 3275 Display Station Models 1, 2 & 3 and 3277 Display Station Models 1 & 2 Parts Catalog (#S126-0005-2) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3275/3277 Display Station Type B Final Keyboard Assembly

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.
1833052
Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers
Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it.
1772951
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.
Model B 3275/3277 66-key Keyboard
NicknameNickname
A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy.
Beamsaver
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.
IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.
IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.
1974 Q2
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.
SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.
Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.
None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.
None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.
White straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.
66
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.
WTC EBCDIC w/ smooth finish keys
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.
Doc: IBM 3275 Display Station Models 1, 2 & 3 and 3277 Display Station Models 1 & 2 Parts Catalog (#S126-0005-2) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3275/3277 Display Station Type B Final Keyboard Assembly

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.
1833053
Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers
Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it.
1772952
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.
Model B 3275/3277 78-key Keyboard
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.
IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.
IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.
1974 Q2
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.
SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.
Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.
None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.
None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.
White straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.
78
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.
WTC EBCDIC w/ smooth finish keys
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.
Doc: IBM 3275 Display Station Models 1, 2 & 3 and 3277 Display Station Models 1 & 2 Parts Catalog (#S126-0005-2) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3275/3277 Display Station Type B Final Keyboard Assembly

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.
1833054
Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers
Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it.
1772953
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.
Model B 3275/3277 66-key Keyboard
NicknameNickname
A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy.
Beamsaver
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.
IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.
IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.
1974 Q2
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.
SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.
Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.
None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.
None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.
White straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.
66
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.
WTC Data Entry w/ smooth finish keys
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.
Doc: IBM 3275 Display Station Models 1, 2 & 3 and 3277 Display Station Models 1 & 2 Parts Catalog (#S126-0005-2) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3275/3277 Display Station Type B Final Keyboard Assembly

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.
1833055
Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers
Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it.
1772974
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.
Model B 3275/3277 66-key Keyboard
NicknameNickname
A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy.
Beamsaver
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.
IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.
IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.
1974 Q2
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.
SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.
Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.
None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.
None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.
White straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.
66
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.
WTC ASCII w/ smooth finish keys
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.
Doc: IBM 3275 Display Station Models 1, 2 & 3 and 3277 Display Station Models 1 & 2 Parts Catalog (#S126-0005-2) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3275/3277 Display Station Type B Final Keyboard Assembly

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.
1833056
Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers
Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it.
1772975
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.
Model B 3275/3277 78-key Keyboard
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.
IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.
IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.
1974 Q2
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.
SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.
Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.
None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.
None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.
White straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.
78
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.
WTC ASCII w/ smooth finish keys
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.
Doc: IBM 3275 Display Station Models 1, 2 & 3 and 3277 Display Station Models 1 & 2 Parts Catalog (#S126-0005-2) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3275/3277 Display Station Type B Final Keyboard Assembly

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.
1833057
Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers
Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it.
1772973
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.
Model B 3275/3277 78-key Keyboard
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.
IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.
IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.
1974 Q2
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.
SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.
Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.
None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.
None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.
White straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.
78
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.
WTC 1052-7 w/ smooth finish keys
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.
Doc: IBM 3275 Display Station Models 1, 2 & 3 and 3277 Display Station Models 1 & 2 Parts Catalog (#S126-0005-2) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3275/3277 Display Station Type B Final Keyboard Assembly

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.
1833058
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.
Model B 3275/3277 66-key Keyboard
NicknameNickname
A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy.
Beamsaver
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.
IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.
IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.
1974 Q2
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.
SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.
Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.
None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.
None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.
Black straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.
66
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.
UK EBCDIC
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.
Doc: IBM 3275 Display Station Models 1, 2 & 3 and 3277 Display Station Models 1 & 2 Parts Catalog (#S126-0005-2) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3275/3277 Display Station Type B Final Keyboard Assembly

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.
1833059
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.
Model B 3275/3277 78-key Keyboard
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.
IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.
IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.
1974 Q2
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.
SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.
Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.
None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.
None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.
Black straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.
78
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.
UK EBCDIC
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.
Doc: IBM 3275 Display Station Models 1, 2 & 3 and 3277 Display Station Models 1 & 2 Parts Catalog (#S126-0005-2) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3275/3277 Display Station Type B Final Keyboard Assembly

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.
1833060
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.
Model B 3275/3277 66-key Keyboard
NicknameNickname
A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy.
Beamsaver
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.
IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.
IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.
1974 Q2
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.
SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.
Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.
None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.
None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.
Black straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.
66
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.
UK Data Entry
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.
Doc: IBM 3275 Display Station Models 1, 2 & 3 and 3277 Display Station Models 1 & 2 Parts Catalog (#S126-0005-2) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3275/3277 Display Station Type B Final Keyboard Assembly

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.
1833061
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.
Model B 3275/3277 66-key Keyboard
NicknameNickname
A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy.
Beamsaver
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.
IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.
IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.
1974 Q2
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.
SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.
Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.
None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.
None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.
Black straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.
66
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.
France EBCDIC
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.
Doc: IBM 3275 Display Station Models 1, 2 & 3 and 3277 Display Station Models 1 & 2 Parts Catalog (#S126-0005-2) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3275/3277 Display Station Type B Final Keyboard Assembly

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.
1833062
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.
Model B 3275/3277 78-key Keyboard
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.
IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.
IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.
1974 Q2
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.
SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.
Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.
None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.
None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.
Black straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.
78
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.
France EBCDIC
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.
Doc: IBM 3275 Display Station Models 1, 2 & 3 and 3277 Display Station Models 1 & 2 Parts Catalog (#S126-0005-2) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3275/3277 Display Station Type B Final Keyboard Assembly

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.
1833063
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.
Model B 3275/3277 66-key Keyboard
NicknameNickname
A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy.
Beamsaver
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.
IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.
IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.
1974 Q2
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.
SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.
Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.
None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.
None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.
Black straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.
66
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.
France Data Entry
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.
Doc: IBM 3275 Display Station Models 1, 2 & 3 and 3277 Display Station Models 1 & 2 Parts Catalog (#S126-0005-2) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3275/3277 Display Station Type B Final Keyboard Assembly

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.
1833064
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.
Model B 3275/3277 66-key Keyboard
NicknameNickname
A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy.
Beamsaver
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.
IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.
IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.
1974 Q2
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.
SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.
Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.
None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.
None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.
Black straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.
66
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.
France EBCDIC Dual Case
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.
Doc: IBM 3275 Display Station Models 1, 2 & 3 and 3277 Display Station Models 1 & 2 Parts Catalog (#S126-0005-2) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3275/3277 Display Station Type B Final Keyboard Assembly

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.
1833065
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.
Model B 3275/3277 78-key Keyboard
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.
IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.
IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.
1974 Q2
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.
SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.
Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.
None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.
None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.
Black straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.
78
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.
France EBCDIC Dual Case
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.
Doc: IBM 3275 Display Station Models 1, 2 & 3 and 3277 Display Station Models 1 & 2 Parts Catalog (#S126-0005-2) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3275/3277 Display Station Type B Final Keyboard Assembly

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.
1833066
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.
Model B 3275/3277 66-key Keyboard
NicknameNickname
A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy.
Beamsaver
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.
IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.
IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.
1974 Q2
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.
SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.
Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.
None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.
None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.
Black straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.
66
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.
Germany EBCDIC
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.
Doc: IBM 3275 Display Station Models 1, 2 & 3 and 3277 Display Station Models 1 & 2 Parts Catalog (#S126-0005-2) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3275/3277 Display Station Type B Final Keyboard Assembly

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.
1833067
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.
Model B 3275/3277 78-key Keyboard
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.
IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.
IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.
1974 Q2
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.
SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.
Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.
None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.
None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.
Black straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.
78
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.
Germany EBCDIC
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.
Doc: IBM 3275 Display Station Models 1, 2 & 3 and 3277 Display Station Models 1 & 2 Parts Catalog (#S126-0005-2) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3275/3277 Display Station Type B Final Keyboard Assembly

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.
1833068
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.
Model B 3275/3277 66-key Keyboard
NicknameNickname
A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy.
Beamsaver
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.
IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.
IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.
1974 Q2
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.
SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.
Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.
None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.
None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.
Black straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.
66
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.
Germany Data Entry
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.
Doc: IBM 3275 Display Station Models 1, 2 & 3 and 3277 Display Station Models 1 & 2 Parts Catalog (#S126-0005-2) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3275/3277 Display Station Type B Final Keyboard Assembly

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.
1833069
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.
Model B 3275/3277 66-key Keyboard
NicknameNickname
A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy.
Beamsaver
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.
IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.
IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.
1974 Q2
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.
SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.
Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.
None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.
None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.
Black straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.
66
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.
Germany EBCDIC Dual Case
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.
Doc: IBM 3275 Display Station Models 1, 2 & 3 and 3277 Display Station Models 1 & 2 Parts Catalog (#S126-0005-2) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3275/3277 Display Station Type B Final Keyboard Assembly

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.
1833070
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.
Model B 3275/3277 78-key Keyboard
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.
IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.
IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.
1974 Q2
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.
SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.
Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.
None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.
None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.
Black straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.
78
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.
Germany EBCDIC Dual Case
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.
Doc: IBM 3275 Display Station Models 1, 2 & 3 and 3277 Display Station Models 1 & 2 Parts Catalog (#S126-0005-2) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3275/3277 Display Station Type B Final Keyboard Assembly

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.
1833071
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.
Model B 3275/3277 66-key Keyboard
NicknameNickname
A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy.
Beamsaver
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.
IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.
IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.
1974 Q2
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.
SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.
Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.
None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.
None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.
Black straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.
66
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.
Italy EBCDIC
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.
Doc: IBM 3275 Display Station Models 1, 2 & 3 and 3277 Display Station Models 1 & 2 Parts Catalog (#S126-0005-2) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3275/3277 Display Station Type B Final Keyboard Assembly

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.
1833072
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.
Model B 3275/3277 78-key Keyboard
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.
IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.
IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.
1974 Q2
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.
SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.
Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.
None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.
None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.
Black straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.
78
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.
Italy EBCDIC
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.
Doc: IBM 3275 Display Station Models 1, 2 & 3 and 3277 Display Station Models 1 & 2 Parts Catalog (#S126-0005-2) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3275/3277 Display Station Type B Final Keyboard Assembly

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.
1833073
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.
Model B 3275/3277 66-key Keyboard
NicknameNickname
A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy.
Beamsaver
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.
IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.
IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.
1974 Q2
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.
SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.
Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.
None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.
None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.
Black straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.
66
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.
Italy Data Entry
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.
Doc: IBM 3275 Display Station Models 1, 2 & 3 and 3277 Display Station Models 1 & 2 Parts Catalog (#S126-0005-2) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3275/3277 Display Station Type B Final Keyboard Assembly

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.
1833074
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.
Model B 3275/3277 66-key Keyboard
NicknameNickname
A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy.
Beamsaver
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.
IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.
IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.
1974 Q2
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.
SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.
Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.
None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.
None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.
Black straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.
66
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.
Italy EBCDIC Dual Case
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.
Doc: IBM 3275 Display Station Models 1, 2 & 3 and 3277 Display Station Models 1 & 2 Parts Catalog (#S126-0005-2) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3275/3277 Display Station Type B Final Keyboard Assembly

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.
1833075
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.
Model B 3275/3277 78-key Keyboard
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.
IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.
IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.
1974 Q2
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.
SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.
Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.
None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.
None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.
Black straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.
78
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.
Italy EBCDIC Dual Case
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.
Doc: IBM 3275 Display Station Models 1, 2 & 3 and 3277 Display Station Models 1 & 2 Parts Catalog (#S126-0005-2) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3275/3277 Display Station Type B Final Keyboard Assembly

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.
1833076
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.
Model B 3275/3277 66-key Keyboard
NicknameNickname
A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy.
Beamsaver
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.
IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.
IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.
1974 Q2
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.
SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.
Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.
None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.
None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.
Black straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.
66
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.
Sweden/Finland EBCDIC
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.
Doc: IBM 3275 Display Station Models 1, 2 & 3 and 3277 Display Station Models 1 & 2 Parts Catalog (#S126-0005-2) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3275/3277 Display Station Type B Final Keyboard Assembly

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.
1833077
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.
Model B 3275/3277 78-key Keyboard
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.
IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.
IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.
1974 Q2
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.
SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.
Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.
None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.
None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.
Black straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.
78
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.
Sweden/Finland EBCDIC
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.
Doc: IBM 3275 Display Station Models 1, 2 & 3 and 3277 Display Station Models 1 & 2 Parts Catalog (#S126-0005-2) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3275/3277 Display Station Type B Final Keyboard Assembly

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.
1833078
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.
Model B 3275/3277 66-key Keyboard
NicknameNickname
A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy.
Beamsaver
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.
IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.
IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.
1974 Q2
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.
SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.
Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.
None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.
None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.
Black straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.
66
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.
Sweden/Finland Data Entry
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.
Doc: IBM 3275 Display Station Models 1, 2 & 3 and 3277 Display Station Models 1 & 2 Parts Catalog (#S126-0005-2) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3275/3277 Display Station Type B Final Keyboard Assembly

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.
1833079
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.
Model B 3275/3277 66-key Keyboard
NicknameNickname
A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy.
Beamsaver
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.
IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.
IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.
1974 Q2
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.
SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.
Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.
None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.
None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.
Black straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.
66
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.
Denmark EBCDIC
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.
Doc: IBM 3275 Display Station Models 1, 2 & 3 and 3277 Display Station Models 1 & 2 Parts Catalog (#S126-0005-2) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3275/3277 Display Station Type B Final Keyboard Assembly

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.
1833080
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.
Model B 3275/3277 78-key Keyboard
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.
IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.
IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.
1974 Q2
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.
SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.
Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.
None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.
None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.
Black straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.
78
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.
Denmark EBCDIC
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.
Doc: IBM 3275 Display Station Models 1, 2 & 3 and 3277 Display Station Models 1 & 2 Parts Catalog (#S126-0005-2) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3275/3277 Display Station Type B Final Keyboard Assembly

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.
1833081
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.
Model B 3275/3277 66-key Keyboard
NicknameNickname
A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy.
Beamsaver
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.
IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.
IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.
1974 Q2
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.
SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.
Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.
None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.
None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.
Black straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.
66
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.
Denmark Data Entry
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.
Doc: IBM 3275 Display Station Models 1, 2 & 3 and 3277 Display Station Models 1 & 2 Parts Catalog (#S126-0005-2) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3275/3277 Display Station Type B Final Keyboard Assembly

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.
1833082
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.
Model B 3275/3277 66-key Keyboard
NicknameNickname
A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy.
Beamsaver
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.
IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.
IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.
1974 Q2
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.
SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.
Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.
None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.
None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.
Black straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.
66
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.
Norway EBCDIC
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.
Doc: IBM 3275 Display Station Models 1, 2 & 3 and 3277 Display Station Models 1 & 2 Parts Catalog (#S126-0005-2) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3275/3277 Display Station Type B Final Keyboard Assembly

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.
1833083
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.
Model B 3275/3277 78-key Keyboard
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.
IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.
IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.
1974 Q2
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.
SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.
Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.
None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.
None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.
Black straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.
78
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.
Norway EBCDIC
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.
Doc: IBM 3275 Display Station Models 1, 2 & 3 and 3277 Display Station Models 1 & 2 Parts Catalog (#S126-0005-2) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3275/3277 Display Station Type B Final Keyboard Assembly

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.
1833084
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.
Model B 3275/3277 66-key Keyboard
NicknameNickname
A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy.
Beamsaver
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.
IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.
IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.
1974 Q2
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.
SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.
Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.
None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.
None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.
Black straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.
66
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.
Norway Data Entry
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.
Doc: IBM 3275 Display Station Models 1, 2 & 3 and 3277 Display Station Models 1 & 2 Parts Catalog (#S126-0005-2) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3275/3277 Display Station Type B Final Keyboard Assembly

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.
1833085
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.
Model B 3275/3277 66-key Keyboard
NicknameNickname
A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy.
Beamsaver
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.
IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.
IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.
1974 Q2
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.
SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.
Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.
None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.
None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.
Black straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.
66
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.
Spain EBCDIC
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.
Doc: IBM 3275 Display Station Models 1, 2 & 3 and 3277 Display Station Models 1 & 2 Parts Catalog (#S126-0005-2) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3275/3277 Display Station Type B Final Keyboard Assembly

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.
1833086
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.
Model B 3275/3277 78-key Keyboard
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.
IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.
IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.
1974 Q2
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.
SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.
Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.
None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.
None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.
Black straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.
78
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.
Spain EBCDIC
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.
Doc: IBM 3275 Display Station Models 1, 2 & 3 and 3277 Display Station Models 1 & 2 Parts Catalog (#S126-0005-2) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3275/3277 Display Station Type B Final Keyboard Assembly

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.
1833087
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.
Model B 3275/3277 66-key Keyboard
NicknameNickname
A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy.
Beamsaver
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.
IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.
IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.
1974 Q2
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.
SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.
Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.
None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.
None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.
Black straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.
66
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.
Spain Data Entry
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.
Doc: IBM 3275 Display Station Models 1, 2 & 3 and 3277 Display Station Models 1 & 2 Parts Catalog (#S126-0005-2) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3275/3277 Display Station Type B Final Keyboard Assembly

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.
1833088
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.
Model B 3275/3277 66-key Keyboard
NicknameNickname
A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy.
Beamsaver
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.
IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.
IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.
1974 Q2
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.
SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.
Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.
None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.
None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.
Black straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.
66
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.
Belgium EBCDIC
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.
Doc: IBM 3275 Display Station Models 1, 2 & 3 and 3277 Display Station Models 1 & 2 Parts Catalog (#S126-0005-2) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3275/3277 Display Station Type B Final Keyboard Assembly

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.
1833089
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.
Model B 3275/3277 78-key Keyboard
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.
IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.
IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.
1974 Q2
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.
SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.
Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.
None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.
None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.
Black straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.
78
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.
Belgium EBCDIC
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.
Doc: IBM 3275 Display Station Models 1, 2 & 3 and 3277 Display Station Models 1 & 2 Parts Catalog (#S126-0005-2) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3275/3277 Display Station Type B Final Keyboard Assembly

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.
1833090
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.
Model B 3275/3277 66-key Keyboard
NicknameNickname
A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy.
Beamsaver
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.
IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.
IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.
1974 Q2
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.
SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.
Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.
None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.
None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.
Black straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.
66
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.
Belgium Data Entry
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.
Doc: IBM 3275 Display Station Models 1, 2 & 3 and 3277 Display Station Models 1 & 2 Parts Catalog (#S126-0005-2) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3275/3277 Display Station Type B Final Keyboard Assembly

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.
1833091
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.
Model B 3275/3277 66-key Keyboard
NicknameNickname
A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy.
Beamsaver
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.
IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.
IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.
1974 Q2
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.
SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.
Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.
None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.
None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.
Black straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.
66
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.
Belgium EBCDIC Dual Case
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.
Doc: IBM 3275 Display Station Models 1, 2 & 3 and 3277 Display Station Models 1 & 2 Parts Catalog (#S126-0005-2) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3275/3277 Display Station Type B Final Keyboard Assembly

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.
1833092
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.
Model B 3275/3277 78-key Keyboard
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.
IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.
IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.
1974 Q2
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.
SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.
Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.
None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.
None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.
Black straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.
78
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.
Belgium EBCDIC Dual Case
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.
Doc: IBM 3275 Display Station Models 1, 2 & 3 and 3277 Display Station Models 1 & 2 Parts Catalog (#S126-0005-2) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3275/3277 Display Station Type B Final Keyboard Assembly

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.
1833093
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.
Model B 3275/3277 66-key Keyboard
NicknameNickname
A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy.
Beamsaver
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.
IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.
IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.
1974 Q2
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.
SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.
Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.
None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.
None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.
Black straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.
66
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.
Portugal/Brazil EBCDIC
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.
Doc: IBM 3275 Display Station Models 1, 2 & 3 and 3277 Display Station Models 1 & 2 Parts Catalog (#S126-0005-2) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3275/3277 Display Station Type B Final Keyboard Assembly

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.
1833094
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.
Model B 3275/3277 78-key Keyboard
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.
IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.
IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.
1974 Q2
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.
SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.
Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.
None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.
None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.
Black straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.
78
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.
Portugal/Brazil EBCDIC
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.
Doc: IBM 3275 Display Station Models 1, 2 & 3 and 3277 Display Station Models 1 & 2 Parts Catalog (#S126-0005-2) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3275/3277 Display Station Type B Final Keyboard Assembly

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.
1833095
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.
Model B 3275/3277 66-key Keyboard
NicknameNickname
A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy.
Beamsaver
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.
IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.
IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.
1974 Q2
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.
SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.
Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.
None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.
None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.
Black straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.
66
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.
Portugal/Brazil Data Entry
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.
Doc: IBM 3275 Display Station Models 1, 2 & 3 and 3277 Display Station Models 1 & 2 Parts Catalog (#S126-0005-2) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3275/3277 Display Station Type B Final Keyboard Assembly

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.
1836441
Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers
Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it.
1863828
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.
Model B 3275/3277 66-key Keyboard
NicknameNickname
A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy.
Beamsaver
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.
IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.
IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.
1974 Q2
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.
SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.
Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.
None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.
None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.
White straightened-style fixed DB-25 cable
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.
66
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.
US/Canada Data Entry II w/ textured finish keys
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.
Doc: IBM 3275 Display Station Models 1, 2 & 3 and 3277 Display Station Models 1 & 2 Parts Catalog (#S126-0005-2) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 5320 System/32 Keyboard Assembly

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.
1748187
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.
Model B 5320 System/32 Keyboard Assembly
Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems
A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops.
IBM 5320 System/32
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.
IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.
IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.
1975 Q1
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.
SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.
Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.
N/A
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.
None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.
Integrated
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.
78
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.
Portugal
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.
Doc: IBM System/32 Parts Catalog (#S131-0595-5) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 5320 System/32 Keyboard Assembly

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.
1852237
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.
Model B 5320 System/32 Keyboard Assembly
Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems
A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops.
IBM 5320 System/32
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.
IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.
IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.
1975 Q1
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.
SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.
Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.
IBM black rectangle badge
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.
None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.
Integrated
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.
78
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.
USA
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.
Doc: IBM System/32 Parts Catalog (#S131-0595-5) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 5320 System/32 Keyboard Assembly

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.
1865210
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.
Model B 5320 System/32 Keyboard Assembly
Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems
A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops.
IBM 5320 System/32
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.
IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.
IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.
1975 Q1
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.
SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.
Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.
N/A
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.
None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.
Integrated
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.
78
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.
Austria/Germany QWERTZ
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.
Doc: IBM System/32 Parts Catalog (#S131-0595-5) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 5320 System/32 Keyboard Assembly

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.
1865211
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.
Model B 5320 System/32 Keyboard Assembly
Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems
A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops.
IBM 5320 System/32
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.
IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.
IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.
1975 Q1
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.
SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.
Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.
N/A
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.
None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.
Integrated
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.
78
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.
Austria/Germany QWERTY
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.
Doc: IBM System/32 Parts Catalog (#S131-0595-5) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 5320 System/32 Keyboard Assembly

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.
1865212
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.
Model B 5320 System/32 Keyboard Assembly
Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems
A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops.
IBM 5320 System/32
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.
IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.
IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.
1975 Q1
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.
SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.
Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.
N/A
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.
None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.
Integrated
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.
78
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.
Belgium
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.
Doc: IBM System/32 Parts Catalog (#S131-0595-5) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 5320 System/32 Keyboard Assembly

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.
1865213
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.
Model B 5320 System/32 Keyboard Assembly
Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems
A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops.
IBM 5320 System/32
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.
IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.
IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.
1975 Q1
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.
SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.
Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.
N/A
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.
None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.
Integrated
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.
78
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.
Brazil
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.
Doc: IBM System/32 Parts Catalog (#S131-0595-5) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 5320 System/32 Keyboard Assembly

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.
1865214
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.
Model B 5320 System/32 Keyboard Assembly
Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems
A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops.
IBM 5320 System/32
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.
IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.
IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.
1975 Q1
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.
SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.
Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.
N/A
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.
None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.
Integrated
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.
78
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.
Denmark
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.
Doc: IBM System/32 Parts Catalog (#S131-0595-5) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 5320 System/32 Keyboard Assembly

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.
1865215
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.
Model B 5320 System/32 Keyboard Assembly
Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems
A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops.
IBM 5320 System/32
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.
IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.
IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.
1975 Q1
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.
SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.
Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.
N/A
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.
None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.
Integrated
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.
78
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.
Finland
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.
Doc: IBM System/32 Parts Catalog (#S131-0595-5) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 5320 System/32 Keyboard Assembly

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.
1865216
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.
Model B 5320 System/32 Keyboard Assembly
Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems
A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops.
IBM 5320 System/32
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.
IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.
IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.
1975 Q1
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.
SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.
Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.
N/A
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.
None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.
Integrated
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.
78
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.
Norway
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.
Doc: IBM System/32 Parts Catalog (#S131-0595-5) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 5320 System/32 Keyboard Assembly

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.
1865217
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.
Model B 5320 System/32 Keyboard Assembly
Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems
A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops.
IBM 5320 System/32
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.
IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.
IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.
1975 Q1
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.
SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.
Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.
N/A
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.
None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.
Integrated
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.
78
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.
Sweden
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.
Doc: IBM System/32 Parts Catalog (#S131-0595-5) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 5320 System/32 Keyboard Assembly

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.
1865218
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.
Model B 5320 System/32 Keyboard Assembly
Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems
A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops.
IBM 5320 System/32
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.
IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.
IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.
1975 Q1
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.
SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.
Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.
N/A
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.
None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.
Integrated
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.
78
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.
UK 1
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.
Doc: IBM System/32 Parts Catalog (#S131-0595-5) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 5320 System/32 Keyboard Assembly

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.
1865219
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.
Model B 5320 System/32 Keyboard Assembly
Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems
A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops.
IBM 5320 System/32
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.
IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.
IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.
1975 Q1
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.
SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.
Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.
N/A
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.
None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.
Integrated
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.
78
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.
Japan
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.
Doc: IBM System/32 Parts Catalog (#S131-0595-5) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 5320 System/32 Keyboard Assembly

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.
1865220
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.
Model B 5320 System/32 Keyboard Assembly
Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems
A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops.
IBM 5320 System/32
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.
IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.
IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.
1975 Q1
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.
SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.
Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.
N/A
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.
None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.
Integrated
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.
78
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.
Katakana
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.
Doc: IBM System/32 Parts Catalog (#S131-0595-5) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 5320 System/32 Keyboard Assembly

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.
1865221
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.
Model B 5320 System/32 Keyboard Assembly
Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems
A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops.
IBM 5320 System/32
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.
IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.
IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.
1975 Q1
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.
SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.
Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.
N/A
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.
None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.
Integrated
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.
78
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.
France QWERTY
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.
Doc: IBM System/32 Parts Catalog (#S131-0595-5) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 5320 System/32 Keyboard Assembly

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.
1865222
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.
Model B 5320 System/32 Keyboard Assembly
Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems
A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops.
IBM 5320 System/32
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.
IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.
IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.
1975 Q1
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.
SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.
Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.
N/A
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.
None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.
Integrated
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.
78
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.
France AZERTY
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.
Doc: IBM System/32 Parts Catalog (#S131-0595-5) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 5320 System/32 Keyboard Assembly

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.
1865223
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.
Model B 5320 System/32 Keyboard Assembly
Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems
A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops.
IBM 5320 System/32
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.
IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.
IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.
1975 Q1
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.
SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.
Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.
N/A
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.
None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.
Integrated
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.
78
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.
Italy
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.
Doc: IBM System/32 Parts Catalog (#S131-0595-5) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 5320 System/32 Keyboard Assembly

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.
1865224
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.
Model B 5320 System/32 Keyboard Assembly
Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems
A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops.
IBM 5320 System/32
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.
IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.
IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.
1975 Q1
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.
SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.
Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.
N/A
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.
None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.
Integrated
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.
78
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.
Spain
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.
Doc: IBM System/32 Parts Catalog (#S131-0595-5) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 5320 System/32 Keyboard Assembly

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.
1865225
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.
Model B 5320 System/32 Keyboard Assembly
Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems
A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops.
IBM 5320 System/32
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.
IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.
IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.
1975 Q1
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.
SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.
Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.
N/A
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.
None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.
Integrated
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.
78
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.
Spanish Speaking
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.
Doc: IBM System/32 Parts Catalog (#S131-0595-5) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 5320 System/32 Keyboard Assembly

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.
1865244
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.
Model B 5320 System/32 Keyboard Assembly
Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems
A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops.
IBM 5320 System/32
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.
IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.
IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.
1975 Q1
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.
SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.
Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.
IBM black rectangle badge
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.
None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.
Integrated
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.
78
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.
ASCII
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.
Doc: IBM System/32 Parts Catalog (#S131-0595-5) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 5320 System/32 Keyboard Assembly

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.
5192714
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.
Model B 5320 System/32 Keyboard Assembly
Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems
A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops.
IBM 5320 System/32
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.
IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.
IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.
1975 Q1
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.
SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.
Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.
N/A
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.
None
ConnectionConnection
The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology.
Integrated
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.
78
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.
UK 2
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.
Doc: IBM System/32 Parts Catalog (#S131-0595-5) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3741 Data Station Model 1, 2, 3 & 4 Proof Keyboard

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.
1643101
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.
Model B 3741/3742 Data Entry Keyboard
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.
IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.
IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.
1975 Q2
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.
SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.
Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.
None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.
None
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.
61
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.
Japan (3-switch only)
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.
Doc: IBM 3741 Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0585-2) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3741 Data Station Model 1 & 2 Proof Keyboard

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.
1643106
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.
Model B 3741/3742 Data Entry Keyboard
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.
IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.
IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.
1975 Q2
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.
SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.
Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.
None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.
None
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.
61
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.
Brazil (3 or 4 switch)
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.
Doc: IBM 3741 Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0585-2) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3741 Data Station Model 1 & 2 Proof Keyboard

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.
1643111
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.
Model B 3741/3742 Data Entry Keyboard
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.
IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.
IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.
1975 Q2
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.
SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.
Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.
None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.
None
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.
61
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.
Belgium (3 or 4 switch)
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.
Doc: IBM 3741 Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0585-2) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3741 Data Station Model 1 & 2 Proof Keyboard

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.
1643116
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.
Model B 3741/3742 Data Entry Keyboard
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.
IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.
IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.
1975 Q2
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.
SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.
Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.
None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.
None
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.
61
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.
Denmark (3 or 4 switch)
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.
Doc: IBM 3741 Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0585-2) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3741 Data Station Model 1 & 2 Proof Keyboard

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.
1643121
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.
Model B 3741/3742 Data Entry Keyboard
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.
IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.
IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.
1975 Q2
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.
SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.
Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.
None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.
None
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.
61
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.
Sweden/Finland (3 or 4 switch)
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.
Doc: IBM 3741 Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0585-2) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3741 Data Station Model 1 & 2 Proof Keyboard

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.
1643126
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.
Model B 3741/3742 Data Entry Keyboard
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.
IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.
IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.
1975 Q2
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.
SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.
Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.
None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.
None
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.
61
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.
Norway (3 or 4 switch)
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.
Doc: IBM 3741 Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0585-2) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3741 Data Station Model 1 & 2 Proof Keyboard

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.
1643131
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.
Model B 3741/3742 Data Entry Keyboard
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.
IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.
IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.
1975 Q2
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.
SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.
Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.
None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.
None
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.
61
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.
UK (3 or 4 switch)
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.
Doc: IBM 3741 Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0585-2) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3741 Data Station Model 1 & 2 Proof Keyboard

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.
1643136
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.
Model B 3741/3742 Data Entry Keyboard
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.
IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.
IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.
1975 Q2
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.
SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.
Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.
None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.
None
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.
61
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.
Spain (3 or 4 switch)
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.
Doc: IBM 3741 Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0585-2) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3741 Data Station Model 1 & 2 Proof Keyboard

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.
1643141
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.
Model B 3741/3742 Data Entry Keyboard
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.
IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.
IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.
1975 Q2
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.
SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.
Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.
None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.
None
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.
61
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.
Italy (3 or 4 switch)
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.
Doc: IBM 3741 Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0585-2) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3741 Data Station Model 1 & 2 Proof Keyboard

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.
1643146
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.
Model B 3741/3742 Data Entry Keyboard
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.
IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.
IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.
1975 Q2
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.
SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.
Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.
None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.
None
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.
61
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.
France QWERTY (3 or 4 switch)
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.
Doc: IBM 3741 Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0585-2) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3741 Data Station Model 1 & 2 Proof Keyboard

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.
1643151
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.
Model B 3741/3742 Data Entry Keyboard
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.
IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.
IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.
1975 Q2
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.
SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.
Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.
None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.
None
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.
61
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.
Germany (3 or 4 switch)
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.
Doc: IBM 3741 Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0585-2) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3741 Data Station Model 1 & 2 Proof Keyboard

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.
1643156
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.
Model B 3741/3742 Data Entry Keyboard
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.
IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.
IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.
1975 Q2
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.
SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.
Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.
None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.
None
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.
61
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.
German w/ English (3 or 4 switch)
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.
Doc: IBM 3741 Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0585-2) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3741 Data Station Model 1 & 2 Proof Keyboard

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.
1643161
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.
Model B 3741/3742 Data Entry Keyboard
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.
IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.
IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.
1975 Q2
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.
SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.
Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.
None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.
None
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.
61
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.
Latin America (3 or 4 switch)
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.
Doc: IBM 3741 Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0585-2) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3741 Data Station Model 1, 2, 3 & 4 Proof Keyboard

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.
1643166
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.
Model B 3741/3742 Data Entry Keyboard
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.
IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.
IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.
1975 Q2
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.
SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.
Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.
None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.
None
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.
63
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.
Katakana (4-switch only)
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.
Doc: IBM 3741 Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0585-2) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3741 Data Station Model 1 & 2 Proof Keyboard

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.
1643171
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.
Model B 3741/3742 Data Entry Keyboard
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.
IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.
IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.
1975 Q2
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.
SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.
Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.
None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.
None
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.
61
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.
France AZERTY (3 or 4 switch)
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.
Doc: IBM 3741 Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0585-2) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3741 Data Station Model 2 & 3 Data Entry Keyboard

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.
1643587
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.
Model B 3741/3742 Data Entry Keyboard
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.
IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.
IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.
1975 Q2
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.
SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.
Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.
None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.
None
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.
61
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.
US (3 or 4 switch)
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.
Doc: IBM 3741 Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0585-2) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3741 Data Station Model 2 & 3 Data Entry Keyboard

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.
1643588
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.
Model B 3741/3742 Data Entry Keyboard
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.
IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.
IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.
1975 Q2
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.
SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.
Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.
None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.
None
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.
61
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.
Germany (3 or 4 switch)
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.
Doc: IBM 3741 Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0585-2) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3741 Data Station Model 2 & 3 Data Entry Keyboard

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.
1643589
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.
Model B 3741/3742 Data Entry Keyboard
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.
IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.
IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.
1975 Q2
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.
SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.
Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.
None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.
None
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.
61
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.
German w/ English (3 or 4 switch)
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.
Doc: IBM 3741 Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0585-2) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3741 Data Station Model 2 & 3 Data Entry Keyboard

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.
1643590
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.
Model B 3741/3742 Data Entry Keyboard
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.
IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.
IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.
1975 Q2
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.
SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.
Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.
None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.
None
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.
61
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.
UK (3 or 4 switch)
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.
Doc: IBM 3741 Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0585-2) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3741 Data Station Model 2 & 3 Data Entry Keyboard

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.
1643591
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.
Model B 3741/3742 Data Entry Keyboard
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.
IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.
IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.
1975 Q2
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.
SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.
Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.
None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.
None
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.
61
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.
Denmark (3 or 4 switch)
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.
Doc: IBM 3741 Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0585-2) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3741 Data Station Model 2 & 3 Data Entry Keyboard

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.
1643592
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.
Model B 3741/3742 Data Entry Keyboard
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.
IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.
IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.
1975 Q2
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.
SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.
Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.
None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.
None
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.
61
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.
Norway (3 or 4 switch)
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.
Doc: IBM 3741 Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0585-2) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3741 Data Station Model 2 & 3 Data Entry Keyboard

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.
1643593
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.
Model B 3741/3742 Data Entry Keyboard
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.
IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.
IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.
1975 Q2
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.
SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.
Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.
None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.
None
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.
61
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.
Sweden/Finland (3 or 4 switch)
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.
Doc: IBM 3741 Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0585-2) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3741 Data Station Model 2 & 3 Data Entry Keyboard

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.
1643594
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.
Model B 3741/3742 Data Entry Keyboard
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.
IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.
IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.
1975 Q2
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.
SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.
Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.
None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.
None
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.
61
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.
Spain (3 or 4 switch)
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.
Doc: IBM 3741 Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0585-2) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3741 Data Station Model 2 & 3 Data Entry Keyboard

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.
1643649
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.
Model B 3741/3742 Data Entry Keyboard
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.
IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.
IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.
1975 Q2
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.
SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.
Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.
None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.
None
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.
61
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.
France AZERTY (3 or 4 switch)
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.
Doc: IBM 3741 Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0585-2) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3741 Data Station Model 2 & 3 Data Entry Keyboard

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.
1645075
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.
Model B 3741/3742 Data Entry Keyboard
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.
IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.
IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.
1975 Q2
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.
SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.
Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.
None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.
None
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.
61
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.
France QWERTY (3 or 4 switch)
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.
Doc: IBM 3741 Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0585-2) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3741 Data Station Model 2 & 3 Data Entry Keyboard

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.
1645076
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.
Model B 3741/3742 Data Entry Keyboard
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.
IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.
IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.
1975 Q2
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.
SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.
Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.
None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.
None
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.
61
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.
Belgium (3 or 4 switch)
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.
Doc: IBM 3741 Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0585-2) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3741 Data Station Model 2 & 3 Data Entry Keyboard

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.
1645077
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.
Model B 3741/3742 Data Entry Keyboard
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.
IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.
IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.
1975 Q2
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.
SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.
Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.
None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.
None
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.
61
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.
Italy (3 or 4 switch)
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.
Doc: IBM 3741 Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0585-2) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3741 Data Station Model 2 & 3 Data Entry Keyboard

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.
1645078
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.
Model B 3741/3742 Data Entry Keyboard
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.
IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.
IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.
1975 Q2
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.
SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.
Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.
None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.
None
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.
61
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.
Portugal (3 or 4 switch)
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.
Doc: IBM 3741 Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0585-2) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3741 Data Station Model 2 & 3 Data Entry Keyboard

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.
1645079
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.
Model B 3741/3742 Data Entry Keyboard
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.
IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.
IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.
1975 Q2
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.
SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.
Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.
None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.
None
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.
61
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.
Brazil (3 or 4 switch)
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.
Doc: IBM 3741 Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0585-2) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3741 Data Station Model 2 & 3 Data Entry Keyboard

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.
1645080
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.
Model B 3741/3742 Data Entry Keyboard
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.
IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.
IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.
1975 Q2
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.
SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.
Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.
None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.
None
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.
61
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.
Latin America (3 or 4 switch)
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.
Doc: IBM 3741 Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0585-2) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3741 Data Station Model 2 & 3 Proof Keyboard

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.
1645081
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.
Model B 3741/3742 Data Entry Keyboard
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.
IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.
IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.
1975 Q2
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.
SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.
Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.
None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.
None
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.
61
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.
US (3 or 4 switch)
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.
Doc: IBM 3741 Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0585-2) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3741 Data Station Model 2 & 3 Proof Keyboard

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.
1645082
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.
Model B 3741/3742 Data Entry Keyboard
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.
IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.
IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.
1975 Q2
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.
SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.
Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.
None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.
None
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.
61
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.
Germany (3 or 4 switch)
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.
Doc: IBM 3741 Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0585-2) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3741 Data Station Model 2 & 3 Proof Keyboard

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.
1645083
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.
Model B 3741/3742 Data Entry Keyboard
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.
IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.
IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.
1975 Q2
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.
SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.
Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.
None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.
None
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.
61
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.
German w/ English (3 or 4 switch)
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.
Doc: IBM 3741 Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0585-2) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3741 Data Station Model 2 & 3 Proof Keyboard

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.
1645084
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.
Model B 3741/3742 Data Entry Keyboard
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.
IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.
IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.
1975 Q2
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.
SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.
Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.
None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.
None
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.
61
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.
UK (3 or 4 switch)
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.
Doc: IBM 3741 Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0585-2) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3741 Data Station Model 2 & 3 Proof Keyboard

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.
1645085
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.
Model B 3741/3742 Data Entry Keyboard
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.
IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.
IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.
1975 Q2
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.
SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.
Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.
None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.
None
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.
61
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.
Denmark (3 or 4 switch)
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.
Doc: IBM 3741 Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0585-2) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3741 Data Station Model 2 & 3 Proof Keyboard

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.
1645086
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.
Model B 3741/3742 Data Entry Keyboard
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.
IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.
IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.
1975 Q2
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.
SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.
Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.
None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.
None
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.
61
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.
Norway (3 or 4 switch)
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.
Doc: IBM 3741 Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0585-2) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3741 Data Station Model 2 & 3 Proof Keyboard

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.
1645087
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.
Model B 3741/3742 Data Entry Keyboard
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.
IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.
IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.
1975 Q2
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.
SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.
Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.
None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.
None
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.
61
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.
Sweden/Finland (3 or 4 switch)
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.
Doc: IBM 3741 Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0585-2) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3741 Data Station Model 2 & 3 Proof Keyboard

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.
1645088
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.
Model B 3741/3742 Data Entry Keyboard
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.
IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.
IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.
1975 Q2
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.
SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.
Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.
None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.
None
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.
61
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.
Spain (3 or 4 switch)
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.
Doc: IBM 3741 Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0585-2) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3741 Data Station Model 2 & 3 Proof Keyboard

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.
1645089
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.
Model B 3741/3742 Data Entry Keyboard
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.
IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.
IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.
1975 Q2
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.
SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.
Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.
None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.
None
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.
61
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.
France AZERTY (3 or 4 switch)
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.
Doc: IBM 3741 Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0585-2) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3741 Data Station Model 2 & 3 Proof Keyboard

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.
1645090
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.
Model B 3741/3742 Data Entry Keyboard
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.
IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.
IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.
1975 Q2
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.
SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.
Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.
None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.
None
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.
61
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.
France QWERTY (3 or 4 switch)
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.
Doc: IBM 3741 Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0585-2) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3741 Data Station Model 2 & 3 Proof Keyboard

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.
1645091
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.
Model B 3741/3742 Data Entry Keyboard
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.
IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.
IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.
1975 Q2
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.
SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.
Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.
None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.
None
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.
61
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.
Belgium (3 or 4 switch)
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.
Doc: IBM 3741 Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0585-2) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3741 Data Station Model 2 & 3 Proof Keyboard

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.
1645092
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.
Model B 3741/3742 Data Entry Keyboard
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.
IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.
IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.
1975 Q2
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.
SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.
Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.
None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.
None
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.
61
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.
Italy (3 or 4 switch)
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.
Doc: IBM 3741 Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0585-2) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3741 Data Station Model 2 & 3 Proof Keyboard

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.
1645093
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.
Model B 3741/3742 Data Entry Keyboard
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.
IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.
IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.
1975 Q2
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.
SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.
Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.
None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.
None
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.
61
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.
Portugal (3 or 4 switch)
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.
Doc: IBM 3741 Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0585-2) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3741 Data Station Model 2 & 3 Proof Keyboard

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.
1645094
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.
Model B 3741/3742 Data Entry Keyboard
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.
IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.
IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.
1975 Q2
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.
SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.
Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.
None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.
None
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.
61
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.
Belgium (3 or 4 switch)
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.
Doc: IBM 3741 Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0585-2) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3741 Data Station Model 2 & 3 Proof Keyboard

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.
1645095
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.
Model B 3741/3742 Data Entry Keyboard
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.
IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.
IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.
1975 Q2
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.
SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.
Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.
None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.
None
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.
61
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.
Latin America (3 or 4 switch)
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.
Doc: IBM 3741 Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0585-2) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3741 Data Station Model 1 & 2 Proof Keyboard

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.
1748180
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.
Model B 3741/3742 Data Entry Keyboard
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.
IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.
IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.
1975 Q2
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.
SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.
Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.
None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.
None
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.
61
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.
Portugal (3 or 4 switch)
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.
Doc: IBM 3741 Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0585-2) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3741 Data Station Model 1 & 2 Data Entry Keyboard

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.
1748183
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.
Model B 3741/3742 Data Entry Keyboard
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.
IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.
IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.
1975 Q2
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.
SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.
Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.
None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.
None
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.
61
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.
Portugal (3 or 4 switch)
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.
Doc: IBM 3741 Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0585-2) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3741 Data Station Model 1 & 2 Data Entry Keyboard

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.
1770680
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.
Model B 3741/3742 Data Entry Keyboard
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.
IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.
IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.
1975 Q2
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.
SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.
Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.
None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.
None
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.
61
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.
ASCII (3 or 4 switch)
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.
Doc: IBM 3741 Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0585-2) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3741 Data Station Model 1 & 2 Data Entry Keyboard

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.
1770685
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.
Model B 3741/3742 Data Entry Keyboard
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.
IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.
IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.
1975 Q2
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.
SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.
Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.
None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.
None
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.
61
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.
France AZERTY (3 or 4 switch)
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.
Doc: IBM 3741 Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0585-2) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3741 Data Station Model 1, 2, 3 & 4 Data Entry Keyboard

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.
1852156
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.
Model B 3741/3742 Data Entry Keyboard
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.
IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.
IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.
1975 Q2
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.
SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.
Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.
None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.
None
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.
61
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.
Japan (3-switch only)
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.
Doc: IBM 3741 Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0585-2) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3741 Data Station Model 1 & 2 Data Entry Keyboard

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.
1852159
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.
Model B 3741/3742 Data Entry Keyboard
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.
IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.
IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.
1975 Q2
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.
SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.
Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.
None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.
None
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.
61
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.
Brazil (3 or 4 switch)
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.
Doc: IBM 3741 Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0585-2) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3741 Data Station Model 1 & 2 Data Entry Keyboard

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.
1852162
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.
Model B 3741/3742 Data Entry Keyboard
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.
IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.
IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.
1975 Q2
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.
SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.
Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.
None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.
None
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.
61
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.
Belgium (3 or 4 switch)
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.
Doc: IBM 3741 Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0585-2) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3741 Data Station Model 1 & 2 Data Entry Keyboard

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.
1852165
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.
Model B 3741/3742 Data Entry Keyboard
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.
IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.
IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.
1975 Q2
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.
SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.
Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.
None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.
None
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.
61
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.
Denmark (3 or 4 switch)
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.
Doc: IBM 3741 Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0585-2) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3741 Data Station Model 1 & 2 Data Entry Keyboard

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.
1852168
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.
Model B 3741/3742 Data Entry Keyboard
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.
IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.
IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.
1975 Q2
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.
SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.
Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.
None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.
None
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.
61
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.
Sweden/Finland (3 or 4 switch)
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.
Doc: IBM 3741 Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0585-2) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3741 Data Station Model 1 & 2 Data Entry Keyboard

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.
1852171
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.
Model B 3741/3742 Data Entry Keyboard
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.
IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.
IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.
1975 Q2
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.
SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.
Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.
None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.
None
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.
61
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.
Norway (3 or 4 switch)
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.
Doc: IBM 3741 Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0585-2) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3741 Data Station Model 1 & 2 Data Entry Keyboard

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.
1852174
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.
Model B 3741/3742 Data Entry Keyboard
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.
IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.
IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.
1975 Q2
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.
SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.
Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.
None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.
None
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.
61
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.
UK (3 or 4 switch)
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.
Doc: IBM 3741 Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0585-2) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3741 Data Station Model 1 & 2 Data Entry Keyboard

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.
1852177
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.
Model B 3741/3742 Data Entry Keyboard
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.
IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.
IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.
1975 Q2
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.
SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.
Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.
None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.
None
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.
61
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.
Spain (3 or 4 switch)
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.
Doc: IBM 3741 Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0585-2) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3741 Data Station Model 1 & 2 Data Entry Keyboard

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.
1852180
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.
Model B 3741/3742 Data Entry Keyboard
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.
IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.
IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.
1975 Q2
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.
SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.
Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.
None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.
None
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.
61
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.
Italy (3 or 4 switch)
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.
Doc: IBM 3741 Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0585-2) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3741 Data Station Model 1 & 2 Data Entry Keyboard

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.
1852183
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.
Model B 3741/3742 Data Entry Keyboard
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.
IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.
IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.
1975 Q2
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.
SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.
Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.
None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.
None
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.
61
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.
France QWERTY (3 or 4 switch)
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.
Doc: IBM 3741 Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0585-2) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3741 Data Station Model 1 & 2 Data Entry Keyboard

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.
1852186
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.
Model B 3741/3742 Data Entry Keyboard
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.
IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.
IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.
1975 Q2
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.
SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.
Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.
None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.
None
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.
61
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.
Germany (3 or 4 switch)
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.
Doc: IBM 3741 Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0585-2) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3741 Data Station Model 1 & 2 Data Entry Keyboard

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.
1854394
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.
Model B 3741/3742 Data Entry Keyboard
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.
IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.
IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.
1975 Q2
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.
SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.
Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.
None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.
None
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.
61
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.
German w/ English (3 or 4 switch)
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.
Doc: IBM 3741 Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0585-2) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3741 Data Station Model 1 & 2 Data Entry Keyboard

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.
1854413
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.
Model B 3741/3742 Data Entry Keyboard
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.
IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.
IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.
1975 Q2
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.
SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.
Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.
None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.
None
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.
61
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.
Latin America (3 or 4 switch)
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.
Doc: IBM 3741 Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0585-2) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3741 Data Station Model 1, 2, 3 & 4 Data Entry Keyboard

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.
1854438
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.
Model B 3741/3742 Data Entry Keyboard
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.
IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.
IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.
1975 Q2
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.
SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.
Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.
None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.
None
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.
63
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.
Katakana (4-switch only)
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.
Doc: IBM 3741 Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0585-2) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3741 Data Station Model 1 & 2 Proof Keyboard

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.
1864956
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.
Model B 3741/3742 Data Entry Keyboard
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.
IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.
IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.
1975 Q2
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.
SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.
Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.
None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.
None
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.
61
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.
US (3 or 4 switch)
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.
Doc: IBM 3741 Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0585-2) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3741 Data Station Model 1 & 2 Data Entry Keyboard

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.
5183435
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.
Model B 3741/3742 Data Entry Keyboard
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.
IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.
IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.
1975 Q2
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.
SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.
Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.
None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.
None
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.
61
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.
US (3 or 4 switch)
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.
Doc: IBM 3741 Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0585-2) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3742 Dual Data Station Proof Keyboard

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.
1643104
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.
Model B 3741/3742 Data Entry Keyboard
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.
IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.
IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.
1976 Q3
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.
SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.
Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.
None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.
None
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.
61
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.
Japan
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.
Doc: IBM 3742 Dual Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0586-2) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3742 Dual Data Station Proof Keyboard

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.
1643109
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.
Model B 3741/3742 Data Entry Keyboard
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.
IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.
IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.
1976 Q3
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.
SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.
Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.
None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.
None
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.
61
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.
Brazil
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.
Doc: IBM 3742 Dual Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0586-2) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3742 Dual Data Station Proof Keyboard

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.
1643114
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.
Model B 3741/3742 Data Entry Keyboard
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.
IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.
IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.
1976 Q3
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.
SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.
Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.
None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.
None
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.
61
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.
Belgium
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.
Doc: IBM 3742 Dual Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0586-2) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3742 Dual Data Station Proof Keyboard

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.
1643119
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.
Model B 3741/3742 Data Entry Keyboard
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.
IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.
IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.
1976 Q3
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.
SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.
Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.
None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.
None
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.
61
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.
Denmark
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.
Doc: IBM 3742 Dual Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0586-2) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3742 Dual Data Station Proof Keyboard

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.
1643124
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.
Model B 3741/3742 Data Entry Keyboard
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.
IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.
IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.
1976 Q3
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.
SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.
Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.
None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.
None
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.
61
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.
Sweden/Finland
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.
Doc: IBM 3742 Dual Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0586-2) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3742 Dual Data Station Proof Keyboard

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.
1643129
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.
Model B 3741/3742 Data Entry Keyboard
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.
IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.
IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.
1976 Q3
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.
SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.
Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.
None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.
None
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.
61
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.
Norway
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.
Doc: IBM 3742 Dual Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0586-2) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3742 Dual Data Station Proof Keyboard

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.
1643134
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.
Model B 3741/3742 Data Entry Keyboard
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.
IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.
IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.
1976 Q3
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.
SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.
Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.
None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.
None
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.
61
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.
UK
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.
Doc: IBM 3742 Dual Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0586-2) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3742 Dual Data Station Proof Keyboard

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.
1643139
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names.
Model B 3741/3742 Data Entry Keyboard
OEMOEM
Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it.
IBM
Key-switchesKey-switches
The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys.
IBM beam springs
Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance
The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found.
1976 Q3
Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps
The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique.
SAN with double-shot legends
Casing ColourCasing Colour
The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs.
Pearl White
BrandingBranding
The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time.
None
FeetFeet
The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised.
None
Key CountKey Count
The number of keys that this keyboard originally had.
61
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language
Image of Layout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard.
Spain
Source(s)Source(s)
Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources.
Doc: IBM 3742 Dual Data Station Parts Catalog (#S131-0586-2) [source: bitsavers]

IBM 3742 Dual Data Station Proof Keyboard

Part NumberPart Number
The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc.
1643144
TypeType
A designation from my own type naming scheme used